blob: 3c8317252ee88364a10c5dce5a510da43d40e8ce [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
14#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000015#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
16#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
21#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000023#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000026#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000027#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000028#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000029#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
30#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
34#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
35#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
38#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
39#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000040#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000041#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000042#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000043#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000044#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000045#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
46#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000047#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000048#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000049#include <algorithm>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000050#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000051#include <set>
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000052using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000053using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000054
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000055#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
56
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000057// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
58// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
59// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
60// minimum reasonable default.
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000061static cl::opt<unsigned>
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000062PHINodeFoldingThreshold("phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
63 cl::desc("Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000064
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000065static cl::opt<bool>
66DupRet("simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
67 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
68
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000069static cl::opt<bool>
70SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
71 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
72
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +000073static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
74 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
75 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +000076
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000077static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
78 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
79 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
80 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
81 "predicated store"));
82
83static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
84 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
85 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
86 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
87
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +000088static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
89 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
90 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
91 "executed"));
92
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +000093static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
94 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
95 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
96 "speculatively executed instructions"));
97
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +000098STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +000099STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000100STATISTIC(NumLookupTables, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +0000101STATISTIC(NumLookupTablesHoles, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000102STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000103STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons, "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000104STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000105
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000106namespace {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000107 // The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
Sanjay Patel9361d352015-09-10 16:31:19 +0000108 // case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
109 // cases composing the case group.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000110 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
111 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
112 // The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
Sanjay Patel9361d352015-09-10 16:31:19 +0000113 // and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
114 // switch for that PHI.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000115 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
116
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000117 /// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
118 struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
119 ConstantInt *Value;
120 BasicBlock *Dest;
121
122 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
123 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
124
125 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
126 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
127 return Value < RHS.Value;
128 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000129
130 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000131 };
132
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000133class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000134 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000135 const DataLayout &DL;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000136 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +0000137 AssumptionCache *AC;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000138 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
139 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI,
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000140 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000141 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000142 BasicBlock *Pred,
143 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000144 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
145 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000146
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000147 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000148 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000149 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
150 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000151 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000152 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000153 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000154 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +0000155 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <> &Builder);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000156 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <>&Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000157
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000158public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000159 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
160 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC)
161 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold), AC(AC) {}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000162 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
163};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000164}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000165
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000166/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000167/// terminator instructions together.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000168static bool SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2) {
169 if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000170
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000171 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
172 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
173 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
174 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
175 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Chris Lattnerb7b75142007-04-02 01:44:59 +0000176 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000177
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000178 for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I)
179 if (SI1Succs.count(*I))
180 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin();
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000181 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
182 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
183 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
184 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB))
185 return false;
186 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000187
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000188 return true;
189}
190
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000191/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
192/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
193/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000194static bool isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1,
195 BranchInst *SI2,
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000196 Instruction *Cond,
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000197 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode*> &PhiNodes) {
198 if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self!
199 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
200
201 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000202 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000203 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
204 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
205 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
206 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
207 if (!Ci2) return false;
208 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
209 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
210 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
211 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
212 return false;
213
214 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
215 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
216 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000217 for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I)
218 if (SI1Succs.count(*I))
219 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin();
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000220 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
221 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
222 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000223 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000224 return false;
225 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
226 }
227 return true;
228}
229
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000230/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
231/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
232/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
233/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000234static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
235 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000236 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin())) return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000237
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000238 PHINode *PN;
239 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
240 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
241 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000242}
243
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000244/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
245/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
246/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000247/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000248static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000249 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000250 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000251 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000252 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000253}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000254
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000255/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
256/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000257/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
258/// which works well enough for us.
259///
260/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000261/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
262/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
263/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
264/// set and true is returned.
265///
266/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
267/// Select whose cost is 2.
268///
269/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
270/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
271/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000272static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Craig Topper71b7b682014-08-21 05:55:13 +0000273 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction*> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000274 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000275 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
276 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000277 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
278 // so limit the recursion depth.
279 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
280 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
281 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
282 return false;
283
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000284 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000285 if (!I) {
286 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
287 // can be executed unconditionally.
288 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
289 if (C->canTrap())
290 return false;
291 return true;
292 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000293 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000294
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000295 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000296 // the bottom of this block.
297 if (PBB == BB) return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000298
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000299 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
300 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000301 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
302 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000303 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000304 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000305
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000306 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
307 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000308 if (!AggressiveInsts) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000309
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000310 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
311 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I)) return true;
312
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000313 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
314 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
315 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000316 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000317 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000318
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000319 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000320
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000321 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
322 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
323 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
324 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
325 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
326 // enabled further IR optimizations.
327 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
328 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000329 return false;
330
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000331 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
332 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000333
334 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
335 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000336 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000337 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
338 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000339 return false;
340 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
341 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000342 return true;
343}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000344
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000345/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000346/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000347static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000348 // Normal constant int.
349 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000350 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000351 return CI;
352
353 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
354 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000355 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000356
357 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
358 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
359 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
360
361 // IntToPtr const int.
362 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
363 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
364 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
365 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
366 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
367 return CI;
368 else
369 return cast<ConstantInt>
370 (ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
371 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000372 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000373}
374
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000375namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000376
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000377/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
378/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
379/// structure.
380/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
381/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
382/// representing the different cases for the switch.
383/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
384/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
385/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
386/// fail.
387struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000388 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000389 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
390 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
391 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
392 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000393
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000394 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000395 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
396 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
397 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000398 }
399
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000400 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000401 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000402 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000403 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000404
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000405private:
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000406
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000407 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
408 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
409 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
410 if(CompValue && CompValue != NewVal) return false;
411 CompValue = NewVal;
412 return (CompValue != nullptr);
413 }
414
415 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
416 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
417 /// match depending on isEQ).
418 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
419 /// against is placed in CompValue.
420 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
421 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000422 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000423 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
424 ICmpInst *ICI;
425 ConstantInt *C;
426 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
427 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
428 return false;
429 }
430
431 Value *RHSVal;
432 ConstantInt *RHSC;
433
434 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000435 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000436 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
437 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ:ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
438 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
439 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) {
440 APInt Not = ~RHSC->getValue();
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000441 if (Not.isPowerOf2() && C->getValue().isPowerOf2() &&
442 Not != C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000443 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
444 if(!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
445 return false;
446
447 Vals.push_back(C);
448 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
449 C->getValue() | Not));
450 UsedICmps++;
451 return true;
452 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000453 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000454
455 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
456 if(!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
457 return false;
458
459 UsedICmps++;
460 Vals.push_back(C);
461 return ICI->getOperand(0);
462 }
463
464 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000465 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
466 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000467
468 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
469 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
470 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
471 if(match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) {
472 Span = Span.subtract(RHSC->getValue());
473 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
474 }
475
476 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
477 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
478 // x != 0 && x != 1.
479 if (!isEQ)
480 Span = Span.inverse();
481
482 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
483 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
484 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000485 }
486
487 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000488 if(!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
489 return false;
490
491 // Add all values from the range to the set
492 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
493 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000494
495 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000496 return true;
497
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000498 }
499
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000500 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000501 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
502 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
503 /// vector.
504 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000505 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000506 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
507 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000508
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000509 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
510 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000511 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000512
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000513 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000514 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000515 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000516
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000517 while(!DFT.empty()) {
518 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000519
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000520 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
521 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
522 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000523 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
524 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
525 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
526 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000527 continue;
528 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000529
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000530 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000531 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000532 // Match succeed, continue the loop
533 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000534 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000535
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000536 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
537 // comparison against the same value as the others.
538 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
539 if (!Extra) {
540 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000541 continue;
542 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000543 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
544 CompValue = nullptr;
545 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000546 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000547 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000548};
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000549
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000550}
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000551
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000552static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000553 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000554 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
555 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
556 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
557 if (BI->isConditional())
558 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000559 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
560 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000561 }
562
563 TI->eraseFromParent();
564 if (Cond) RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
565}
566
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000567/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000568/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000569Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000570 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000571 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
572 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
573 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000574 if (SI->getNumSuccessors()*std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
575 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <= 128)
576 CV = SI->getCondition();
577 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000578 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000579 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000580 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000581 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000582 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000583
584 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000585 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000586 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
587 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000588 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000589 CV = Ptr;
590 }
591 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000592 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000593}
594
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000595/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000596/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000597BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000598GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI,
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000599 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase>
600 &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000601 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000602 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
603 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e; ++i)
604 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(),
605 i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000606 return SI->getDefaultDest();
607 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000608
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000609 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000610 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000611 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
612 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1),
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000613 DL),
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000614 Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000615 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000616}
617
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000618
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000619/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000620/// in the list that match the specified block.
621static void EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
622 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000623 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000624}
625
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000626/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000627static bool
628ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
629 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase > &C2) {
630 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
631
632 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
633 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
634 std::swap(V1, V2);
635
636 if (V1->size() == 0) return false;
637 if (V1->size() == 1) {
638 // Just scan V2.
639 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
640 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
641 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
642 return true;
643 }
644
645 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
646 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
647 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
648 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
649 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
650 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
651 return true;
652 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
653 ++i1;
654 else
655 ++i2;
656 }
657 return false;
658}
659
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000660/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
661/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
662/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
663/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
664/// very limited form of jump threading.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000665bool SimplifyCFGOpt::
666SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000667 BasicBlock *Pred,
668 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000669 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
670 if (!PredVal) return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
671
672 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
673 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
674 if (ThisVal != PredVal) return false; // Different predicates.
675
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000676 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
677 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
678
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000679 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000680 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000681 BasicBlock *PredDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(),
682 PredCases);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000683 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000684
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000685 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000686 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000687 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000688 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000689
690 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
691 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
692 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
693 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
694 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
695 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000696 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000697 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000698
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000699 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
700 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
701 // uncond br.
702 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
703 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000704 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000705 (void) NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000706
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000707 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000708 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000709
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000710 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
711 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000712
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000713 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
714 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000715 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000716
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000717 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
718 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000719 SmallPtrSet<Constant*, 16> DeadCases;
720 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
721 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000722
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000723 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000724 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000725
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000726 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
727 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000728 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000729 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
730 if (HasWeight)
731 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
732 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000733 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000734 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
735 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000736 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
737 --i;
738 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000739 if (HasWeight) {
740 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back());
741 Weights.pop_back();
742 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000743 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
744 SI->removeCase(i);
745 }
746 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000747 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000748 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
749 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).
750 createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000751
752 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000753 return true;
754 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000755
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000756 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
757 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000758 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000759 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000760 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
761 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000762 if (TIV)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000763 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
764 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
765 }
766 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000767
768 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
769 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000770 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000771 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
772 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
773 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
774 break;
775 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000776
777 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000778 if (!TheRealDest) TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000779
780 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
781 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000782 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(TIBB), e = succ_end(TIBB); SI != e; ++SI)
783 if (*SI != CheckEdge)
784 (*SI)->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000785 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000786 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000787
788 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000789 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000790 (void) NI;
791
792 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
793 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n");
794
795 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
796 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000797}
798
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000799namespace {
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000800 /// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000801 /// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
802 /// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
803 struct ConstantIntOrdering {
804 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
805 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
806 }
807 };
808}
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000809
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000810static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
811 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
812 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
813 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000814 if (LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()))
815 return 1;
816 if (LHS->getValue() == RHS->getValue())
817 return 0;
818 return -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000819}
820
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000821static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction* I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000822 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000823 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
824 if (MDString* MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
825 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
826
827 return false;
828}
829
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000830/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
831/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
832/// metadata.
833static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
834 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000835 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000836 assert(MD);
837 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000838 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000839 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000840 }
841
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000842 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
843 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
844 // default weight to be the first entry.
845 if (BranchInst* BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
846 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
847 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
848 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
849 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000850 }
851}
852
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000853/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000854static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000855 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
856 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
857 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
858 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
859 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000860 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000861}
862
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000863/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
864/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000865/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
866/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000867bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
868 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000869 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
870 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
871 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
872 bool Changed = false;
873
Chris Lattner6b39cb92008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000874 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000875 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000876 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000877
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000878 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
879 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
880 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
881
882 if (PCV == CV && SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI)) {
883 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000884 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000885 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
886
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000887 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000888 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
889
890 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
891 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
892 // build.
Chris Lattner6b39cb92008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000893 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000894
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000895 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
896 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000897 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
898 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
899
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000900 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000901 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000902 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000903 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
904 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
905 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000906 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
907 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
908 // successor's weights
909 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000910
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000911 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000912 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000913 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000914 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000915 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
916 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
917 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000918 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000919
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000920 if (PredDefault == BB) {
921 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
922 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000923 std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
924 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
925 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
926 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
927 else {
928 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
929 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000930
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000931 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
932 // Increase weight for the default case.
933 Weights[0] += Weights[i+1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000934 std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back());
935 Weights.pop_back();
936 }
937
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000938 PredCases.pop_back();
939 --i; --e;
940 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000941
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000942 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000943 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
944 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
945 PredDefault = BBDefault;
946 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
947 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000948
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000949 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
950 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000951 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
952 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
953 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
954 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
955 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000956 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
957 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
958 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
959 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
960 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i+1]);
961 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i+1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000962 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000963 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000964
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000965 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
966 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
967 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
968 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
969 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
970 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
971 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
972 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000973 } else {
974 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
975 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
976 // activated.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000977 std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000978 std::map<ConstantInt*, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000979 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
980 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
981 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000982
983 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
984 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i+1];
985 std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back());
986 Weights.pop_back();
987 }
988
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000989 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
990 PredCases.pop_back();
991 --i; --e;
992 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000993
994 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
995 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000996 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
997 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
998 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000999 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1000 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001001 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1002 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
1003 PTIHandled.erase(BBCases[i].Value);// This constant is taken care of
1004 }
1005
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001006 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1007 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001008 for (std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering>::iterator I =
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001009 PTIHandled.begin(),
1010 E = PTIHandled.end(); I != E; ++I) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001011 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1012 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[*I]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001013 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(*I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001014 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001015 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001016 }
1017
1018 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1019 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1020 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001021 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1022 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001023
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001024 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001025 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001026 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001027 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001028 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001029 }
1030
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001031 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001032 SwitchInst *NewSI = Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault,
1033 PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001034 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001035 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1036 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001037
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001038 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1039 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1040 FitWeights(Weights);
1041
1042 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1043
1044 NewSI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1045 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).
1046 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
1047 }
1048
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001049 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001050
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001051 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1052 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1053 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001054 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001055 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1056 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001057 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001058 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001059 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00001060 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
1061 "infloop", BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001062 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001063 }
1064 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1065 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001066
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001067 Changed = true;
1068 }
1069 }
1070 return Changed;
1071}
1072
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001073// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1074// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1075// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001076static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1077 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001078 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001079 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001080 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001081 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1082 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1083 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1084 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V==I1 || BB2V==I2)) {
1085 return false;
1086 }
1087 }
1088 }
1089 return true;
1090}
1091
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001092static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1093
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001094/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1095/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1096/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001097static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001098 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001099 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1100 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1101 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1102 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1103 // identical order.
1104 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1105 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
1106
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001107 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1108 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1109
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001110 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001111 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1112 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1113 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1114 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1115 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001116 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001117 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001118 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001119 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001120 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001121 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001122 return false;
1123
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001124 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001125
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001126 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001127 do {
1128 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1129 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1130 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1131 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001132
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001133 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1134 return Changed;
1135
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001136 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1137 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1138 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001139 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001140 if (!I2->use_empty())
1141 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Dan Gohmanc8a27f22009-08-25 22:11:20 +00001142 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001143 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {
Piotr Padlewskidc9b2cf2015-10-02 22:12:22 +00001144 LLVMContext::MD_tbaa, LLVMContext::MD_range,
1145 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath, LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
Artur Pilipenko5c5011d2015-11-02 17:53:51 +00001146 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull, LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1147 LLVMContext::MD_align, LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1148 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001149 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001150 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001151 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001152
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001153 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1154 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001155 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1156 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1157 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1158 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1159 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001160 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001161 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001162 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001163 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001164 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001165
1166 return true;
1167
1168HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001169 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1170 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001171 return Changed;
1172
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001173 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001174 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001175 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001176 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1177 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1178 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1179 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1180 continue;
1181
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001182 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1183 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1184 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1185 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
1186 return Changed;
1187
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001188 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001189 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001190 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001191 return Changed;
1192 }
1193 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001194
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001195 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001196 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001197 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001198 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001199 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1200 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001201 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001202 }
1203
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001204 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001205 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1206 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1207 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1208 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
1209 std::map<std::pair<Value*,Value*>, SelectInst*> InsertedSelects;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001210 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001211 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001212 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001213 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001214 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1215 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001216 if (BB1V == BB2V) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001217
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001218 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1219 // that determines the right value.
1220 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001221 if (!SI)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001222 SI = cast<SelectInst>
1223 (Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1224 BB1V->getName()+"."+BB2V->getName()));
1225
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001226 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1227 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1228 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1229 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001230 }
1231 }
1232
1233 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001234 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI)
1235 AddPredecessorToBlock(*SI, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001236
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001237 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001238 return true;
1239}
1240
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001241/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001242/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1243/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1244/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1245static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1246 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
1247 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI1->getParent();
1248 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1249
1250 // Check that BBEnd has two predecessors and the other predecessor ends with
1251 // an unconditional branch.
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001252 pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BBEnd), PE = pred_end(BBEnd);
1253 BasicBlock *Pred0 = *PI++;
1254 if (PI == PE) // Only one predecessor.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001255 return false;
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001256 BasicBlock *Pred1 = *PI++;
1257 if (PI != PE) // More than two predecessors.
1258 return false;
1259 BasicBlock *BB2 = (Pred0 == BB1) ? Pred1 : Pred0;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001260 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB2->getTerminator());
1261 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isUnconditional())
1262 return false;
1263
1264 // Gather the PHI nodes in BBEnd.
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001265 SmallDenseMap<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, PHINode *> JointValueMap;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001266 Instruction *FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = nullptr;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001267 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BBEnd->begin(), E = BBEnd->end(); I != E; ++I) {
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001268 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
1269 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001270 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001271 JointValueMap[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)] = PN;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001272 } else {
1273 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I;
1274 break;
1275 }
1276 }
1277 if (!FirstNonPhiInBBEnd)
1278 return false;
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001279
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001280 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1281 // instructions in the two blocks. We scan backward for obviously identical
1282 // instructions in an identical order.
1283 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI1 = BB1->getInstList().rbegin(),
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001284 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend(),
1285 RI2 = BB2->getInstList().rbegin(),
1286 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001287 // Skip debug info.
1288 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1;
1289 if (RI1 == RE1)
1290 return false;
1291 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2;
1292 if (RI2 == RE2)
1293 return false;
1294 // Skip the unconditional branches.
1295 ++RI1;
1296 ++RI2;
1297
1298 bool Changed = false;
1299 while (RI1 != RE1 && RI2 != RE2) {
1300 // Skip debug info.
1301 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1;
1302 if (RI1 == RE1)
1303 return Changed;
1304 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2;
1305 if (RI2 == RE2)
1306 return Changed;
1307
1308 Instruction *I1 = &*RI1, *I2 = &*RI2;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001309 auto InstPair = std::make_pair(I1, I2);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001310 // I1 and I2 should have a single use in the same PHI node, and they
1311 // perform the same operation.
1312 // Cannot move control-flow-involving, volatile loads, vaarg, etc.
1313 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || isa<PHINode>(I2) ||
1314 isa<TerminatorInst>(I1) || isa<TerminatorInst>(I2) ||
David Majnemerba275f92015-08-19 19:54:02 +00001315 I1->isEHPad() || I2->isEHPad() ||
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001316 isa<AllocaInst>(I1) || isa<AllocaInst>(I2) ||
1317 I1->mayHaveSideEffects() || I2->mayHaveSideEffects() ||
1318 I1->mayReadOrWriteMemory() || I2->mayReadOrWriteMemory() ||
1319 !I1->hasOneUse() || !I2->hasOneUse() ||
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001320 !JointValueMap.count(InstPair))
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001321 return Changed;
1322
1323 // Check whether we should swap the operands of ICmpInst.
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001324 // TODO: Add support of communativity.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001325 ICmpInst *ICmp1 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I1), *ICmp2 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I2);
1326 bool SwapOpnds = false;
1327 if (ICmp1 && ICmp2 &&
1328 ICmp1->getOperand(0) != ICmp2->getOperand(0) &&
1329 ICmp1->getOperand(1) != ICmp2->getOperand(1) &&
1330 (ICmp1->getOperand(0) == ICmp2->getOperand(1) ||
1331 ICmp1->getOperand(1) == ICmp2->getOperand(0))) {
1332 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1333 SwapOpnds = true;
1334 }
1335 if (!I1->isSameOperationAs(I2)) {
1336 if (SwapOpnds)
1337 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1338 return Changed;
1339 }
1340
1341 // The operands should be either the same or they need to be generated
1342 // with a PHI node after sinking. We only handle the case where there is
1343 // a single pair of different operands.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001344 Value *DifferentOp1 = nullptr, *DifferentOp2 = nullptr;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001345 unsigned Op1Idx = ~0U;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001346 for (unsigned I = 0, E = I1->getNumOperands(); I != E; ++I) {
1347 if (I1->getOperand(I) == I2->getOperand(I))
1348 continue;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001349 // Early exit if we have more-than one pair of different operands or if
1350 // we need a PHI node to replace a constant.
1351 if (Op1Idx != ~0U ||
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001352 isa<Constant>(I1->getOperand(I)) ||
1353 isa<Constant>(I2->getOperand(I))) {
1354 // If we can't sink the instructions, undo the swapping.
1355 if (SwapOpnds)
1356 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1357 return Changed;
1358 }
1359 DifferentOp1 = I1->getOperand(I);
1360 Op1Idx = I;
1361 DifferentOp2 = I2->getOperand(I);
1362 }
1363
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001364 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK common instructions " << *I1 << "\n");
1365 DEBUG(dbgs() << " " << *I2 << "\n");
1366
1367 // We insert the pair of different operands to JointValueMap and
1368 // remove (I1, I2) from JointValueMap.
1369 if (Op1Idx != ~0U) {
1370 auto &NewPN = JointValueMap[std::make_pair(DifferentOp1, DifferentOp2)];
1371 if (!NewPN) {
1372 NewPN =
1373 PHINode::Create(DifferentOp1->getType(), 2,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001374 DifferentOp1->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001375 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp1, BB1);
1376 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp2, BB2);
1377 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Create PHI node " << *NewPN << "\n";);
1378 }
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001379 // I1 should use NewPN instead of DifferentOp1.
1380 I1->setOperand(Op1Idx, NewPN);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001381 }
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001382 PHINode *OldPN = JointValueMap[InstPair];
1383 JointValueMap.erase(InstPair);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001384
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001385 // We need to update RE1 and RE2 if we are going to sink the first
1386 // instruction in the basic block down.
1387 bool UpdateRE1 = (I1 == BB1->begin()), UpdateRE2 = (I2 == BB2->begin());
1388 // Sink the instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001389 BBEnd->getInstList().splice(FirstNonPhiInBBEnd->getIterator(),
1390 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001391 if (!OldPN->use_empty())
1392 OldPN->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1393 OldPN->eraseFromParent();
1394
1395 if (!I2->use_empty())
1396 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1397 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Philip Reamesd92c2a72014-10-22 16:37:13 +00001398 // TODO: Use combineMetadata here to preserve what metadata we can
1399 // (analogous to the hoisting case above).
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001400 I2->eraseFromParent();
1401
1402 if (UpdateRE1)
1403 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend();
1404 if (UpdateRE2)
1405 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001406 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I1;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001407 NumSinkCommons++;
1408 Changed = true;
1409 }
1410 return Changed;
1411}
1412
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001413/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1414/// conditional block.
1415///
1416/// We are looking for code like the following:
1417/// BrBB:
1418/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1419/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1420/// ... // function).
1421/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1422/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1423/// ThenBB:
1424/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1425/// br label EndBB
1426/// EndBB:
1427/// ...
1428/// We are going to transform this into:
1429/// BrBB:
1430/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1431/// ... //
1432/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1433/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1434/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1435/// ...
1436///
1437/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1438/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001439static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1440 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001441 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1442 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001443 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001444
1445 // Volatile or atomic.
1446 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001447 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001448
1449 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1450
1451 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
1452 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 10;
1453 for (BasicBlock::reverse_iterator RI = BrBB->rbegin(),
1454 RE = BrBB->rend(); RI != RE && (--MaxNumInstToLookAt); ++RI) {
1455 Instruction *CurI = &*RI;
1456
1457 // Could be calling an instruction that effects memory like free().
1458 if (CurI->mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001459 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001460
1461 StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(CurI);
1462 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1463 if (SI && SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1464 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1465 return SI->getValueOperand();
1466 else if (SI)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001467 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001468 }
1469
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001470 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001471}
1472
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001473/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001474///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001475/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1476/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1477/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1478/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1479/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1480///
1481/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1482/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1483/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1484/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1485///
1486///
1487/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1488/// \code
1489/// BB:
1490/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1491/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1492/// ThenBB:
1493/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001494/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001495/// EndBB:
1496/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1497/// ...
1498/// \endcode
1499///
1500/// Into this IR:
1501/// \code
1502/// BB:
1503/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1504/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1505/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1506/// ...
1507/// \endcode
1508///
1509/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001510static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001511 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001512 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1513 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1514 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1515 return false;
1516
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001517 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1518 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1519
1520 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1521 // to swap the select operands later.
1522 bool Invert = false;
1523 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1524 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1525 Invert = true;
1526 }
1527 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1528
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001529 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1530 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1531 // - They are defined in BB, and
1532 // - They have no side effects, and
1533 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1534 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1535
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001536 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001537 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1538 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001539 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001540 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001541 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001542 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001543 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001544 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1545 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001546
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001547 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001548 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001549 ++SpeculationCost;
1550 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001551 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001552
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001553 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001554 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1555 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1556 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001557 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001558 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001559 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1560 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001561 return false;
1562
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001563 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1564 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1565 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1566
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001567 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001568 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001569 // being sunk into the use block.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001570 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001571 i != e; ++i) {
1572 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001573 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB ||
1574 OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
1575 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1576
1577 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001578 }
1579 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001580
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001581 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1582 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1583 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
1584 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator I =
1585 SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(), E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
1586 I != E; ++I)
1587 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001588 ++SpeculationCost;
1589 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001590 return false;
1591 }
1592
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001593 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
1594 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001595 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001596 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001597 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
1598 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001599
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001600 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001601 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001602 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001603 continue;
1604
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001605 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
1606 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
1607 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
1608 return false;
1609
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001610 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001611 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
1612 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
1613 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001614 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
1615
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001616 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
1617 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001618 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001619 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
1620 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001621 unsigned MaxCost = 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold *
1622 TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
1623 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001624 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001625
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00001626 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
1627 // getting expanded into Instructions.
1628 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001629 // constant expression.
1630 ++SpeculationCost;
1631 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001632 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001633 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001634
1635 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
1636 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001637 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001638 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001639
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001640 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001641 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001642
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001643 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
1644 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
1645 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI);
1646 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
1647 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
1648 if (Invert)
1649 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
1650 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() +
1651 "." + FalseV->getName());
1652 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
1653 }
1654
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00001655 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
1656 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
1657 for (auto &I: *ThenBB)
1658 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
1659
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001660 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001661 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
1662 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001663
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001664 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001665 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001666 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
1667 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
1668 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
1669 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
1670 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
1671 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
1672
1673 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
1674 if (OrigV == ThenV)
1675 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001676
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001677 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001678 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
1679 // destinations were inverted.
1680 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001681 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001682 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
1683 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV,
1684 TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName());
1685 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
1686 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001687 }
1688
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001689 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001690 return true;
1691}
1692
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001693/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001694static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
1695 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001696 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001697
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00001698 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001699 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
1700 continue;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001701 if (Size > 10) return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001702 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001703
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001704 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001705 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001706 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
1707 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
1708 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI)) return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001709 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001710
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001711 // Looks ok, continue checking.
1712 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001713
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001714 return true;
1715}
1716
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001717/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
1718/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
1719/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001720static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001721 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1722 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00001723 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
1724 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001725 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
1726 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001727
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001728 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
1729 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00001730 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001731 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001732 }
1733
1734 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001735 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001736
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00001737 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
1738 if (llvm::any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
1739 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
1740 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
1741 }))
1742 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001743
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001744 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
1745 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001746 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001747 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001748 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1)) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001749
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001750 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
1751 // branch to RealDest.
1752 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
1753 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001754
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001755 if (RealDest == BB) continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001756 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
1757 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator())) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001758
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001759 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
1760 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
1761 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
1762 // the edge we are about to create.
1763 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
1764 RealDest->getName()+".critedge",
1765 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
1766 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001767
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00001768 // Update PHI nodes.
1769 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001770
1771 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
1772 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
1773 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
1774 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
1775 DenseMap<Value*, Value*> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
1776 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
1777 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
1778 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
1779 continue;
1780 }
1781 // Clone the instruction.
1782 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
1783 if (BBI->hasName()) N->setName(BBI->getName()+".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001784
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001785 // Update operands due to translation.
1786 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end();
1787 i != e; ++i) {
1788 DenseMap<Value*, Value*>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
1789 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
1790 *i = PI->second;
1791 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001792
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001793 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001794 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001795 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001796 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001797 } else {
1798 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
1799 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
1800 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001801 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001802 }
1803 }
1804
1805 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
1806 // to EdgeBB instead.
1807 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
1808 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1809 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
1810 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
1811 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
1812 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001813
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001814 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001815 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001816 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001817
1818 return false;
1819}
1820
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001821/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
1822/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001823static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
1824 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001825 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
1826 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
1827 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
1828 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
1829 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
1830 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001831 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
1832 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
1833 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001834 if (!IfCond ||
1835 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
1836 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
1837 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001838
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00001839 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
1840 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
1841 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
1842 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
1843 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
1844 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
1845 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
1846 if (NumPhis > 2)
1847 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001848
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001849 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
1850 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
1851 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001852 SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00001853 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
1854 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001855 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
1856 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001857
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001858 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
1859 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001860 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001861 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001862 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001863 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001864 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001865
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001866 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001867 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001868 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001869 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001870 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001871 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001872
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00001873 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001874 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
1875 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001876 if (!PN) return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001877
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001878 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
1879 // often be turned into switches and other things.
1880 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
1881 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
1882 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
1883 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
1884 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001885
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001886 // If we all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all
1887 // instructions in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If
1888 // not, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so it's not
1889 // worth promoting to select instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001890 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001891 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
1892 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
1893 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001894 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001895 } else {
1896 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
1897 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001898 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001899 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
1900 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control
1901 // flow, so the xform is not worth it.
1902 return false;
1903 }
1904 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001905
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001906 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001907 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001908 } else {
1909 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
1910 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001911 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001912 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
1913 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control
1914 // flow, so the xform is not worth it.
1915 return false;
1916 }
1917 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001918
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00001919 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001920 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001921
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001922 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
1923 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001924 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001925 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001926
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001927 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
1928 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001929 if (IfBlock1)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001930 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001931 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001932 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001933 if (IfBlock2)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001934 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001935 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001936 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001937
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001938 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
1939 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001940 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
1941 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001942
1943 SelectInst *NV =
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00001944 cast<SelectInst>(Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, ""));
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001945 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(NV);
1946 NV->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001947 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001948 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001949
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001950 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
1951 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
1952 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
1953 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00001954 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
1955 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001956 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001957 return true;
1958}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001959
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001960/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
1961/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001962/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001963static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001964 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001965 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
1966 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
1967 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
1968 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
1969 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001970
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001971 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
1972 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
1973 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001974 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00001975 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001976 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00001977 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001978
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001979 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001980 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
1981 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
1982 // branch into a return.
1983 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
1984 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
1985 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001986 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001987 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001988 return true;
1989 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001990
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001991 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
1992 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
1993 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
1994 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001995
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001996 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
1997 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
1998 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
1999 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2000 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2001 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2002 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002003
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002004 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2005 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2006 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2007 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2008 // safe.
2009 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2010 if (TCV->canTrap())
2011 return false;
2012 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2013 if (FCV->canTrap())
2014 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002015
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002016 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2017 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2018 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2019 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002020
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002021 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2022 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002023 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002024 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002025 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2026 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2027 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2028 } else {
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002029 TrueValue = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue,
2030 FalseValue, "retval");
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002031 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002032 }
2033
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002034 Value *RI = !TrueValue ?
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002035 Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
2036
Daniel Dunbar5e0a58b2009-08-23 10:29:55 +00002037 (void) RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002038
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002039 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002040 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
2041 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: "<< *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002042
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002043 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2044
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002045 return true;
2046}
2047
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002048/// Given a conditional BranchInstruction, retrieve the probabilities of the
2049/// branch taking each edge. Fills in the two APInt parameters and returns true,
2050/// or returns false if no or invalid metadata was found.
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002051static bool ExtractBranchMetadata(BranchInst *BI,
2052 uint64_t &ProbTrue, uint64_t &ProbFalse) {
2053 assert(BI->isConditional() &&
2054 "Looking for probabilities on unconditional branch?");
2055 MDNode *ProfileData = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
2056 if (!ProfileData || ProfileData->getNumOperands() != 3) return false;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +00002057 ConstantInt *CITrue =
2058 mdconst::dyn_extract<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(1));
2059 ConstantInt *CIFalse =
2060 mdconst::dyn_extract<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(2));
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002061 if (!CITrue || !CIFalse) return false;
2062 ProbTrue = CITrue->getValue().getZExtValue();
2063 ProbFalse = CIFalse->getValue().getZExtValue();
2064 return true;
2065}
2066
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002067/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002068/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002069static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002070 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2071 return false;
2072 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = PB->begin(), E = PB->end(); I != E; I++) {
2073 Instruction *PBI = &*I;
2074 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2075 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2076 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2077 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2078 return true;
2079 }
2080 }
2081 return false;
2082}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002083
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002084/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2085/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2086/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002087bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002088 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002089
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002090 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002091 if (BI->isConditional())
2092 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2093 else {
2094 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2095 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2096 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2097 // predecessor.
2098 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2099 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2100 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2101 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2102 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
2103 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end();
2104 I != E; ) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002105 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002106 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2107 Cond = Curr;
2108 break;
2109 }
2110 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2111 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2112 return false;
2113 }
2114 }
2115
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002116 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002117 return false;
2118 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002119
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002120 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2121 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002122 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002123
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002124 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002125 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002126
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002127 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002128 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt)) ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002129
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002130 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002131 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002132
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002133 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2134 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2135 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2136 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2137 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2138 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
2139 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != I; ++I) {
2140 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2141 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2142 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002143 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002144 return false;
2145 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2146 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2147 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2148 return false;
2149 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2150 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2151 // and Cond.
2152 ++NumBonusInsts;
2153 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2154 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2155 return false;
2156 }
2157
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002158 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2159 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2160 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2161 if (CE->canTrap())
2162 return false;
2163 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2164 if (CE->canTrap())
2165 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002166
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002167 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
2168 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002169 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002170 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2171 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002172
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002173 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2174 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002175 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002176
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002177 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2178 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2179 // blocks.
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002180 SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002181 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002182 (BI->isConditional() &&
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002183 !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
2184 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2185 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002186 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002187
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002188 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002189 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002190 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002191
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002192 if (BI->isConditional()) {
2193 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest)
2194 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2195 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest)
2196 Opc = Instruction::And;
2197 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest)
2198 Opc = Instruction::And, InvertPredCond = true;
2199 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest)
2200 Opc = Instruction::Or, InvertPredCond = true;
2201 else
2202 continue;
2203 } else {
2204 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2205 continue;
2206 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002207
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002208 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002209 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002210
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002211 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2212 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002213 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002214
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002215 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2216 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2217 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2218 } else {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002219 NewCond = Builder.CreateNot(NewCond,
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002220 PBI->getCondition()->getName()+".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002221 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002222
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002223 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002224 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002225 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002226
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002227 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002228 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002229 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2230 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2231 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002232 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002233 // instructions.
2234 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
2235 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2236 continue;
2237 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2238 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
2239 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingEntries);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002240 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002241
2242 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2243 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2244 // only given the branch precondition.
2245 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2246 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002247 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002248
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002249 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2250 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002251 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002252 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002253
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002254 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2255 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002256 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002257 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
2258 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingEntries);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002259 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002260 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002261 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002262
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002263 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002264 Instruction *NewCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002265 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(),
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002266 New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002267 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2268
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002269 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002270 bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight,
2271 PredFalseWeight);
2272 bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight,
2273 SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002274 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2275
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002276 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002277 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2278 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2279 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
2280 //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
2281 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2282 //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
2283 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2284 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2285 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
2286 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * (SuccFalseWeight +
2287 SuccTrueWeight) + PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2288 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002289 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2290 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2291 }
2292 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002293 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2294 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2295 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
2296 //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
2297 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
2298 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * (SuccFalseWeight +
2299 SuccTrueWeight) + PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2300 //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2301 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2302 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002303 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2304 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2305 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002306 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2307 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2308 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2309
2310 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),NewWeights.end());
2311 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2312 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).
2313 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
2314 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002315 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002316 } else {
2317 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2318 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002319 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002320 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
2321 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002322 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002323 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2324 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2325 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2326 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
2327 Instruction *NotCond =
2328 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(),
2329 "not.cond"));
2330 MergedCond =
2331 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And,
2332 NotCond, New,
2333 "and.cond"));
2334 if (PBI_C->isOne())
2335 MergedCond =
2336 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or,
2337 PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond,
2338 "or.cond"));
2339 } else {
2340 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2341 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2342 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002343 MergedCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002344 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And,
2345 PBI->getCondition(), New,
2346 "and.cond"));
2347 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
2348 Instruction *NotCond =
2349 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(),
2350 "not.cond"));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002351 MergedCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002352 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or,
2353 NotCond, MergedCond,
2354 "or.cond"));
2355 }
2356 }
2357 // Update PHI Node.
2358 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2359 MergedCond);
2360 }
2361 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2362 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2363 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2364 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002365 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002366
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002367 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2368 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2369
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002370 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
2371 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I)
2372 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(*I))
2373 I->clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002374
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002375 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002376 }
2377 return false;
2378}
2379
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002380// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2381// nullptr.
2382static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2383 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2384 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2385 if (!BB)
2386 continue;
2387 for (auto &I : *BB)
2388 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2389 if (S)
2390 // Multiple stores seen.
2391 return nullptr;
2392 else
2393 S = SI;
2394 }
2395 }
2396 return S;
2397}
2398
2399static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2400 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2401 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2402 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2403 //
2404 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2405 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2406 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2407 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2408 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2409 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2410 // one.
2411 //
2412 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2413 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2414 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2415 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2416 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
2417
2418 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2419 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2420 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2421 if (!AlternativeV)
2422 break;
2423
2424 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2425 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2426 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2427 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2428 break;
2429 PHI = nullptr;
2430 }
2431 if (PHI)
2432 return PHI;
2433
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002434 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2435 if (!AlternativeV &&
2436 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2437 return V;
2438
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002439 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002440 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2441 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2442 if (PredBB != BB)
2443 PHI->addIncoming(AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()),
2444 PredBB);
2445 return PHI;
2446}
2447
2448static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2449 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2450 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
2451 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond) {
2452 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2453 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2454 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2455 };
2456
2457 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2458 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2459 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2460 if (!BB)
2461 return true;
2462 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2463 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2464 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002465 unsigned N = 0;
2466 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2467 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2468 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2469 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2470 ++N;
2471 // Free instructions.
2472 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2473 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2474 continue;
2475 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002476 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002477 }
2478 return N <= PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002479 };
2480
2481 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively && (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) ||
2482 !IsWorthwhile(PFB) ||
2483 !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2484 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
2485 return false;
2486
2487 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2488 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2489 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2490 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2491 // testing.
2492 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2493 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2494 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2495 return false;
2496
2497 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2498 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2499 return false;
2500
2501 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2502 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2503 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2504 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2505 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2506 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2507 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2508 //
2509 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2510 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2511 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2512 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2513 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2514 return false;
2515 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2516 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2517 return false;
2518 if (QTB)
2519 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2520 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2521 return false;
2522 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2523 I != E; ++I)
2524 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2525 return false;
2526
2527 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2528 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2529 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2530 ->getCondition();
2531 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2532 ->getCondition();
2533
2534 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2535 PStore->getParent());
2536 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2537 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2538
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002539 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2540
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002541 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
2542 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
2543
2544 if (InvertPCond)
2545 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
2546 if (InvertQCond)
2547 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
2548 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
2549
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002550 auto *T =
2551 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002552 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
2553 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
2554 AAMDNodes AAMD;
2555 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
2556 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
2557 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
2558
2559 QStore->eraseFromParent();
2560 PStore->eraseFromParent();
2561
2562 return true;
2563}
2564
2565static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI) {
2566 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
2567 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
2568 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
2569 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
2570 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
2571 // PBI and QBI.
2572 //
2573 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
2574 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
2575 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
2576 // sequences can be if-converted away.
2577 //
2578 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
2579 //
2580 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
2581 // / \ | \
2582 // PTB PFB | PFB
2583 // \ / | /
2584 // QBI QBI
2585 // / \ | \
2586 // QTB QFB | QFB
2587 // \ / | /
2588 // PostBB PostBB
2589 //
2590 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
2591 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
2592 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
2593 //
2594 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
2595 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
2596 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
2597 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
2598 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
2599
2600 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
2601 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
2602 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
2603 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
2604 InvertPCond = true;
2605 }
2606 if (QFB == PostBB) {
2607 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
2608 InvertQCond = true;
2609 }
2610
2611 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
2612 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
2613 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
2614 PTB = nullptr;
2615 if (QTB == PostBB)
2616 QTB = nullptr;
2617
2618 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
2619 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
2620 // predecessor.
2621 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
2622 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P &&
2623 BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
2624 };
2625 if (!PostBB ||
2626 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
2627 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
2628 return false;
2629 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
2630 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
2631 return false;
2632 if (PostBB->getNumUses() != 2 || QBI->getParent()->getNumUses() != 2)
2633 return false;
2634
2635 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
2636 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
2637 SmallPtrSet<Value *,4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
2638 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
2639 if (!BB)
2640 continue;
2641 for (auto &I : *BB)
2642 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2643 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2644 }
2645 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
2646 if (!BB)
2647 continue;
2648 for (auto &I : *BB)
2649 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2650 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2651 }
2652
2653 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
2654 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
2655 // clear what it contains.
2656 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
2657
2658 bool Changed = false;
2659 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
2660 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
2661 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond);
2662 return Changed;
2663}
2664
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002665/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
2666/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002667/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
2668/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002669static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2670 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002671 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
2672 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00002673
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002674 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002675 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002676 // this conditional branch redundant.
2677 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2678 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2679 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
2680 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
2681 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
2682 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2683 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002684 BI->setCondition(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002685 CondIsTrue));
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002686 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
2687 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002688
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002689 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
2690 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
2691 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
2692 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002693 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002694 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
2695 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
2696 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00002697 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
2698 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
2699 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002700 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002701 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
2702 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002703 PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional() &&
2704 PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2705 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2706 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002707 NewPN->addIncoming(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002708 CondIsTrue), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002709 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002710 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002711 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002712 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002713
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002714 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002715 return true;
2716 }
2717 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002718
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002719 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
2720 if (CE->canTrap())
2721 return false;
2722
Philip Reames846e3e42015-10-29 03:11:49 +00002723 // If BI is reached from the true path of PBI and PBI's condition implies
2724 // BI's condition, we know the direction of the BI branch.
2725 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getParent() &&
Sanjoy Das55ea67c2015-11-06 19:01:08 +00002726 isImpliedCondition(PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL) &&
Philip Reames846e3e42015-10-29 03:11:49 +00002727 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1) &&
2728 BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
2729 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2730 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
2731 BI->setCondition(ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext()));
2732 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
2733 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
2734 }
2735
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002736 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
2737 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
2738 // merged store at the end.
2739 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
2740 return true;
2741
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002742 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002743 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002744 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00002745 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
2746 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2747 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2748 ++BBI;
2749 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002750 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002751
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002752 int PBIOp, BIOp;
2753 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
2754 PBIOp = BIOp = 0;
2755 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
2756 PBIOp = 0, BIOp = 1;
2757 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
2758 PBIOp = 1, BIOp = 0;
2759 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
2760 PBIOp = BIOp = 1;
2761 else
2762 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002763
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002764 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
2765 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
2766 // keep getting unwound.
2767 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
2768 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002769
2770 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002771 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
2772 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002773
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002774 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
2775 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
2776 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
2777
2778 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002779 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2780 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002781 isa<PHINode>(II); ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002782 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
2783 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002784
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002785 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
2786 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2787 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
2788 if (CE->canTrap())
2789 return false;
2790
2791 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2792 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2793 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
2794 if (CE->canTrap())
2795 return false;
2796 }
2797
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002798 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002799 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002800
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002801 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002802 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002803
2804
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002805 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
2806 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
2807 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
2808 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
2809 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
2810 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
2811 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
2812 if (OtherDest == BB) {
2813 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
2814 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002815 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
2816 "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002817 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
2818 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002819 }
2820
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002821 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002822
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002823 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
2824 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002825
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002826 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
2827 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002828 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002829 if (PBIOp)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002830 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName()+".not");
2831
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002832 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
2833 if (BIOp)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002834 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName()+".not");
2835
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002836 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002837 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002838
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002839 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
2840 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
2841 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
2842 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002843
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002844 // Update branch weight for PBI.
2845 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002846 bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight,
2847 PredFalseWeight);
2848 bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight,
2849 SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002850 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2851 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
2852 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ?PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
2853 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
2854 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
2855 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
2856 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
2857 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00002858 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
2859 PredOther * SuccCommon,
2860 PredOther * SuccOther};
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002861 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2862 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2863
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002864 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00002865 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
2866 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002867 }
2868
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002869 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
2870 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002871 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002872
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002873 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
2874 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
2875 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
2876 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002877 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002878 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
2879 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
2880 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2881 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2882 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2883 if (BIV != PBIV) {
2884 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002885 Value *NV = cast<SelectInst>
2886 (Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName()+".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002887 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002888 }
2889 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002890
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002891 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
2892 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002893
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002894 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
2895 // one fewer predecessor.
2896 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002897}
2898
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002899// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
2900// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002901// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
2902// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
2903// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
2904static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002905 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
2906 uint32_t TrueWeight,
2907 uint32_t FalseWeight){
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002908 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
2909 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
2910 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
2911 // successor.
2912 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002913 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002914
2915 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00002916 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002917 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
2918 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002919 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002920 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002921 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002922 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00002923 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
2924 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002925 }
2926
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002927 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
2928 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
2929
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002930 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002931 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002932 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
2933 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
2934 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002935 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002936 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002937 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
2938 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002939 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
2940 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
2941 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2942 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext()).
2943 createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
2944 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002945 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
2946 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
2947 // terminator must be unreachable.
2948 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
2949 } else {
2950 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
2951 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
2952 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002953 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002954 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002955 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002956 else
2957 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002958 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002959 }
2960
2961 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
2962 return true;
2963}
2964
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002965// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002966// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
2967// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
2968// unconditional otherwise.
2969static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
2970 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
2971 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
2972 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
2973 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
2974 return false;
2975
2976 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
2977 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00002978 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
2979 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002980
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002981 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
2982 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
2983 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
2984 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
2985 if (HasWeights) {
2986 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
2987 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
2988 TrueWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).
2989 getSuccessorIndex()];
2990 FalseWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).
2991 getSuccessorIndex()];
2992 }
2993 }
2994
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002995 // Perform the actual simplification.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002996 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB,
2997 TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002998}
2999
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003000// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003001// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3002// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3003// with
3004// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3005static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3006 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3007 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3008 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3009 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3010 return false;
3011
3012 // Extract the actual blocks.
3013 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3014 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3015
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003016 // Perform the actual simplification.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003017 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB,
3018 0, 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003019}
3020
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003021/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3022/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003023/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3024/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3025/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3026/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3027/// like:
3028///
3029/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3030/// DEFAULT:
3031/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3032/// br label %end
3033/// end:
3034/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003035///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003036/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3037/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003038static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003039 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
3040 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
3041 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003042 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003043
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003044 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3045 // complex.
3046 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse()) return false;
3047
3048 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3049 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003050
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003051 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3052 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3053 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3054 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003055 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator())) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003056
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003057 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3058 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3059 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003060
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003061 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3062 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3063 // away.
3064 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3065 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3066 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3067 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003068
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003069 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003070 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003071 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3072 }
3073 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003074 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003075 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003076
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003077 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3078 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3079 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003080 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003081 Value *V;
3082 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3083 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3084 else
3085 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003086
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003087 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3088 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3089 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003090 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003091 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003092
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003093 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3094 // the block.
3095 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003096 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003097 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003098 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3099 return false;
3100
3101 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3102 // true in the PHI.
3103 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
3104 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3105
3106 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3107 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3108
3109 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3110 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3111 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3112 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3113
3114 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3115 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
3116 BasicBlock *NewBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge",
3117 BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003118 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3119 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3120 if (HasWeights) {
3121 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3122 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3123 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
3124 Weights[0] = (Weights[0]+1) >> 1;
3125 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3126
3127 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
3128 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3129 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).
3130 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
3131 }
3132 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003133 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003134
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003135 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003136 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3137 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3138 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003139 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3140 return true;
3141}
3142
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003143/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003144/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3145/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003146static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3147 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003148 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003149 if (!Cond) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003150
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003151 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3152 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3153 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003154
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003155 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003156 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3157 // Unpack the result
3158 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt*> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
3159 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3160 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3161 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003162
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003163 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003164 if (!CompVal) return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003165
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003166 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3167 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3168 return false;
3169
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003170 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3171
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003172 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3173 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3174 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3175 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003176
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003177 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003178 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003179 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003180
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003181 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3182 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3183
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003184 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3185 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
3186 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3187 if (!TrueWhenEqual) std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003188
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003189 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003190
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003191 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003192 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n" << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003193
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003194 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3195 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3196 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3197 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003198 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3199 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003200 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3201 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003202 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3203
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003204 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003205 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003206 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003207 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003208
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003209 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003210
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003211 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3212 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003213 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003214
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003215 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
3216 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003217 BB = NewBB;
3218 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003219
3220 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003221 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3222 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003223 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3224 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003225 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003226
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003227 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003228 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003229
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003230 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3231 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3232 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003233
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003234 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3235 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3236 // the number of edges added.
3237 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin();
3238 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3239 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3240 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3241 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size()-1; i != e; ++i)
3242 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3243 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003244
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003245 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3246 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003247
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003248 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003249 return true;
3250}
3251
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003252bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003253 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3254 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3255 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3256 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3257 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3258 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003259
3260 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003261}
3262
3263// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3264bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3265 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3266
3267 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3268 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3269 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
3270 E = RI->getIterator();
3271 while (++I != E)
3272 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3273 return false;
3274
3275 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
3276 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3277
3278 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
3279 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues();
3280 Idx != End; Idx++) {
3281 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3282 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3283
3284 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3285 // it has other dependents.
3286 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3287 continue;
3288
3289 auto *LandingPad =
3290 dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
3291 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3292 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3293 continue;
3294
3295 bool isTrivial = true;
3296
3297 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3298 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3299 while (++I != E)
3300 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3301 isTrivial = false;
3302 break;
3303 }
3304
3305 if (isTrivial)
3306 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3307 }
3308
3309 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
3310 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty()) return false;
3311
3312 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3313 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3314 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3315 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3316 // to remove them all.
3317 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3318 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3319
3320 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3321 PI != PE;) {
3322 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3323 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3324 }
3325
3326 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3327 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3328 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3329 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3330 // predecessors.
3331 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3332 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3333 }
3334
3335 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3336 if (pred_empty(BB))
3337 BB->eraseFromParent();
3338
3339 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3340}
3341
3342// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3343bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003344 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3345 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003346 assert (RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3347 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003348
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003349 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3350 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003351 while (++I != E)
3352 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3353 return false;
3354
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003355 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003356 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3357 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3358 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003359 }
3360
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003361 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3362 BB->eraseFromParent();
3363 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003364}
3365
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003366bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3367 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3368 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3369 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3370 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3371 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3372 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3373 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3374 // simplified.
3375 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003376 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3377 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003378 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3379 return false;
3380
3381 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003382 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003383 while (++I != E)
3384 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3385 return false;
3386
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003387 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3388 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003389 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003390 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003391
3392 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3393 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3394 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3395 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3396 // are both EH pads).
3397 if (UnwindDest) {
3398 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3399 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003400 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003401 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003402 I != IE; ++I) {
3403 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003404
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003405 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003406 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003407 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003408 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3409 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3410 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3411 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3412 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3413 // pad being removed.
3414 //
3415 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3416 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3417 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3418 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3419 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3420 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3421
3422 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3423 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3424
3425 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3426 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3427 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3428 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003429 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003430 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
3431 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3432 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3433 }
3434 } else {
3435 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3436 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3437 // predecessors with this value.
3438 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3439 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3440 }
3441 }
3442 }
3443
3444 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003445 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003446 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3447 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003448 I != IE;) {
3449 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3450 // being moved to another block.
3451 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3452 if (PN->use_empty())
3453 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3454 // when we erase BB below.
3455 continue;
3456
3457 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3458 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3459 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3460 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3461 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3462 if (pred != BB)
3463 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3464 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3465 }
3466 }
3467
3468 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3469 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3470 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003471 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003472 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003473 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003474 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003475 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003476 }
3477 }
3478
3479 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3480 BB->eraseFromParent();
3481 return true;
3482}
3483
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003484bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003485 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3486 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator()) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003487
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003488 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
3489 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
3490 SmallVector<BranchInst*, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00003491 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
3492 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003493 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
3494 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
3495 if (BI->isUnconditional())
3496 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
3497 else
3498 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
3499 }
3500 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003501
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003502 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003503 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003504 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3505 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
3506 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
3507 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003508 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003509 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003510
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003511 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Ramkumar Ramachandra40c3e032015-01-13 03:46:47 +00003512 if (pred_empty(BB))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003513 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3514 BB->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003515
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003516 return true;
3517 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003518
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003519 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
3520 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
3521 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
3522 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3523 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003524
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003525 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
3526 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
3527 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003528 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003529 return true;
3530 }
3531 return false;
3532}
3533
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003534bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
3535 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003536
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003537 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003538
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003539 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
3540 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003541 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
3542 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003543 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003544 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
3545 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
3546 // operations may have this effect.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003547 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003548
3549 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003550 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003551 if (SI->isVolatile())
3552 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003553 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003554 if (LI->isVolatile())
3555 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003556 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003557 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
3558 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003559 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003560 if (CXI->isVolatile())
3561 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003562 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
3563 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
3564 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
3565 // default.
3566 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
3567 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
3568 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
3569 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003570 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
3571 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003572 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003573 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00003574 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
3575 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
3576 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
3577 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003578 }
3579
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00003580 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
3581 if (!BBI->use_empty())
3582 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003583 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003584 Changed = true;
3585 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003586
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003587 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
3588 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
3589 if (&BB->front() != UI) return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003590
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003591 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
3592 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3593 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003594 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003595 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003596 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
3597 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
3598 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3599 TI->eraseFromParent();
3600 Changed = true;
3601 }
3602 } else {
3603 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003604 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003605 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3606 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003607 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003608 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3609 Changed = true;
3610 }
3611 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003612 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003613 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003614 i != e; ++i)
3615 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003616 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
3617 SI->removeCase(i);
3618 --i; --e;
3619 Changed = true;
3620 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003621 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
3622 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3623 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
3624 Changed = true;
3625 }
3626 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
3627 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3628 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
3629 Changed = true;
3630 continue;
3631 }
3632
3633 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
3634 E = CSI->handler_end();
3635 I != E; ++I) {
3636 if (*I == BB) {
3637 CSI->removeHandler(I);
3638 --I;
3639 --E;
3640 Changed = true;
3641 }
3642 }
3643 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
3644 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
3645 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
3646 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
3647 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
3648 } else {
3649 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
3650 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
3651 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
3652 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
3653 }
3654 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
3655 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
3656 CSI->eraseFromParent();
3657 Changed = true;
3658 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003659 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003660 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3661 TI->eraseFromParent();
3662 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003663 }
3664 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003665
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003666 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Ramkumar Ramachandra40c3e032015-01-13 03:46:47 +00003667 if (pred_empty(BB) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003668 BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
3669 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3670 BB->eraseFromParent();
3671 return true;
3672 }
3673
3674 return Changed;
3675}
3676
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003677static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
3678 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
3679
3680 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3681 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3682 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
3683 return false;
3684 }
3685 return true;
3686}
3687
3688/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
3689/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00003690static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003691 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003692
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003693 bool HasDefault =
3694 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003695
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003696 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
3697 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
3698 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
3699 SmallVector <ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
3700 SmallVector <ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
3701
3702 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I : SI->cases()) {
3703 BasicBlock *Dest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
3704 if (!DestA) DestA = Dest;
3705 if (Dest == DestA) {
3706 CasesA.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3707 continue;
3708 }
3709 if (!DestB) DestB = Dest;
3710 if (Dest == DestB) {
3711 CasesB.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3712 continue;
3713 }
3714 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003715 }
3716
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003717 assert(DestA && DestB && "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
3718 assert(DestA != DestB);
3719 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
3720 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
3721 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
3722
3723 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
3724 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
3725 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
3726 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
3727 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
3728 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
3729 ContiguousDest = DestA;
3730 OtherDest = DestB;
3731 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
3732 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
3733 ContiguousDest = DestB;
3734 OtherDest = DestA;
3735 } else
3736 return false;
3737
3738 // Start building the compare and branch.
3739
3740 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
3741 Constant *NumCases = ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003742
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003743 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
3744 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003745 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
3746
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003747 Value *Cmp;
3748 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003749 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003750 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
3751 else
3752 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003753 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003754
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003755 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003756 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
3757 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003758 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3759 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003760 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
3761 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
3762 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3763 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
3764 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
3765 else
3766 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
3767 }
3768 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
3769 TrueWeight /= 2;
3770 FalseWeight /= 2;
3771 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003772 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003773 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(
3774 (uint32_t)TrueWeight, (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003775 }
3776 }
3777
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003778 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
3779 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3780 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
3781 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest()) ++PreviousEdges;
3782 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003783 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3784 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003785 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3786 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
3787 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest()) ++PreviousEdges;
3788 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
3789 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3790 }
3791
3792 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003793 SI->eraseFromParent();
3794
3795 return true;
3796}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003797
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003798/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003799/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003800static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
3801 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003802 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00003803 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003804 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00003805 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003806
3807 // Gather dead cases.
3808 SmallVector<ConstantInt*, 8> DeadCases;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003809 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003810 if ((I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownZero) != 0 ||
3811 (I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownOne) != KnownOne) {
3812 DeadCases.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003813 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case '"
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003814 << I.getCaseValue() << "' is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003815 }
3816 }
3817
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003818 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00003819 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
3820 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
3821 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003822 bool HasDefault =
3823 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00003824 const unsigned NumUnknownBits = Bits -
3825 (KnownZero.Or(KnownOne)).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00003826 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00003827 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
3828 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
3829 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003830 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
3831 BasicBlock *NewDefault = SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(),
3832 SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003833 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
3834 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003835 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
3836 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
3837 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
3838 return true;
3839 }
3840
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003841 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3842 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3843 if (HasWeight) {
3844 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3845 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
3846 }
3847
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003848 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
3849 for (unsigned I = 0, E = DeadCases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003850 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCases[I]);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003851 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003852 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003853 if (HasWeight) {
3854 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back());
3855 Weights.pop_back();
3856 }
3857
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003858 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003859 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003860 SI->removeCase(Case);
3861 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00003862 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003863 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
3864 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3865 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).
3866 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
3867 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003868
3869 return !DeadCases.empty();
3870}
3871
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003872/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
3873/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003874/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
3875/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
3876/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
3877static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
3878 BasicBlock *BB,
3879 int *PhiIndex) {
3880 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003881 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003882 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003883 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003884
3885 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
3886 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003887 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003888
3889 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
3890
3891 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
3892 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
3893 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
3894 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
3895
3896 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3897 if (InValue != CaseValue) continue;
3898
3899 *PhiIndex = Idx;
3900 return PHI;
3901 }
3902
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003903 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003904}
3905
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003906/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
3907/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
3908/// blocks of the switch can be folded away.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003909/// Returns true if a change is made.
3910static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
3911 typedef DenseMap<PHINode*, SmallVector<int,4> > ForwardingNodesMap;
3912 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
3913
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003914 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003915 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
3916 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003917
3918 int PhiIndex;
3919 PHINode *PHI = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest,
3920 &PhiIndex);
3921 if (!PHI) continue;
3922
3923 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
3924 }
3925
3926 bool Changed = false;
3927
3928 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
3929 E = ForwardingNodes.end(); I != E; ++I) {
3930 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003931 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003932
3933 if (Indexes.size() < 2) continue;
3934
3935 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
3936 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
3937 Changed = true;
3938 }
3939
3940 return Changed;
3941}
3942
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003943/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003944/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Hans Wennborg08238ad2012-09-07 08:22:57 +00003945static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00003946 if (C->isThreadDependent())
3947 return false;
3948 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
3949 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003950
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00003951 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C))
3952 return CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing();
3953
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003954 return isa<ConstantFP>(C) ||
3955 isa<ConstantInt>(C) ||
3956 isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) ||
3957 isa<GlobalValue>(C) ||
3958 isa<UndefValue>(C);
3959}
3960
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003961/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003962/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003963static Constant *LookupConstant(Value *V,
3964 const SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*>& ConstantPool) {
3965 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
3966 return C;
3967 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
3968}
3969
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003970/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003971/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
3972/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003973/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003974static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003975ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
3976 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003977 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003978 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
3979 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003980 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003981 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
3982 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
3983 if (A->isNullValue())
3984 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003985 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003986 }
3987
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003988 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
3989 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
3990 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
3991 COps.push_back(A);
3992 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003993 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003994 }
3995
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003996 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003997 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
3998 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003999 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004000
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004001 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004002}
4003
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004004/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004005/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004006/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004007/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004008static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004009GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004010 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004011 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
4012 const DataLayout &DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004013 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4014 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4015
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004016 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4017 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
4018 SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*> ConstantPool;
4019 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
4020 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
4021 ++I) {
4022 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
4023 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
4024 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1)
4025 return false;
4026 Pred = CaseDest;
4027 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
4028 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
4029 // Skip debug intrinsic.
4030 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004031 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004032 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004033
4034 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4035 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4036 // no longer dominate all its uses.
4037 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
4038 User *User = Use.getUser();
4039 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4040 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4041 continue;
4042 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4043 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4044 continue;
4045 return false;
4046 }
4047
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004048 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004049 } else {
4050 break;
4051 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004052 }
4053
4054 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4055 if (!*CommonDest)
4056 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4057 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4058 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4059 return false;
4060
4061 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
4062 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
4063 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4064 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
4065 if (Idx == -1)
4066 continue;
4067
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004068 Constant *ConstVal = LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx),
4069 ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004070 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004071 return false;
4072
4073 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
4074 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal))
4075 return false;
4076
4077 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
4078 }
4079
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004080 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004081}
4082
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004083// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
4084// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004085static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
4086 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4087 Constant *Result) {
4088 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4089 if (I.first == Result) {
4090 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
4091 return;
4092 }
4093 }
4094 UniqueResults.push_back(std::make_pair(Result,
4095 SmallVector<ConstantInt*, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
4096}
4097
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004098// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004099// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4100// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4101// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004102static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
4103 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4104 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4105 Constant *&DefaultResult,
4106 const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004107 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4108 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4109
4110 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4111 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4112 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
4113 DL))
4114 return false;
4115
4116 // Only one value per case is permitted
4117 if (Results.size() > 1)
4118 return false;
4119 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4120
4121 // Check the PHI consistency.
4122 if (!PHI)
4123 PHI = Results[0].first;
4124 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4125 return false;
4126 }
4127 // Find the default result value.
4128 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4129 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4130 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
4131 DL);
4132 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4133 // is unreachable.
4134 DefaultResult =
4135 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4136 if ((!DefaultResult &&
4137 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
4138 return false;
4139
4140 return true;
4141}
4142
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004143// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4144// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004145// Example:
4146// switch (a) {
4147// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4148// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4149// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4150// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4151// default:
4152// return 4;
4153// }
4154static Value *
4155ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4156 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4157 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4158 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
4159 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
4160 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4161 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4162 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4163 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4164 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4165 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4166
4167 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4168 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4169 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4170 Value *const ValueCompare =
4171 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4172 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4173 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4174 }
4175 Value *const ValueCompare =
4176 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4177 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first, SelectValue,
4178 "switch.select");
4179 }
4180
4181 return nullptr;
4182}
4183
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004184// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4185// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004186static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4187 Value *SelectValue,
4188 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4189 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4190 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4191 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4192 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4193
4194 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4195
4196 // Remove the switch.
4197 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4198 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4199
4200 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4201 continue;
4202 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4203 }
4204 SI->eraseFromParent();
4205}
4206
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004207/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004208/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4209/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
4210static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004211 AssumptionCache *AC, const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004212 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4213 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4214 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4215 Constant *DefaultResult;
4216 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4217 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004218 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
4219 DL))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004220 return false;
4221 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4222 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4223 return false;
4224 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4225
4226 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
4227 Value *SelectValue = ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(
4228 UniqueResults,
4229 DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
4230 if (SelectValue) {
4231 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4232 return true;
4233 }
4234 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4235 return false;
4236}
4237
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004238namespace {
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004239 /// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004240 class SwitchLookupTable {
4241 public:
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004242 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4243 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004244 SwitchLookupTable(
4245 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4246 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4247 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004248
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004249 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004250 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004251 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004252
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004253 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004254 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004255 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00004256 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004257
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004258 private:
4259 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4260 // different ways.
4261 enum {
4262 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4263 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4264 SingleValueKind,
4265
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004266 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4267 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4268 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4269 LinearMapKind,
4270
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004271 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4272 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4273 // shift and mask operations.
4274 BitMapKind,
4275
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004276 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4277 // instructions from the table.
4278 ArrayKind
4279 } Kind;
4280
4281 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
4282 Constant *SingleValue;
4283
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004284 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
4285 ConstantInt *BitMap;
4286 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
4287
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004288 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
4289 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
4290 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
4291
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004292 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
4293 GlobalVariable *Array;
4294 };
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +00004295}
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004296
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004297SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4298 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4299 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4300 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004301 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004302 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004303 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4304 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004305
4306 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004307 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004308
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004309 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4310
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004311 // Build up the table contents.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004312 SmallVector<Constant*, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
4313 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4314 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4315 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004316 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004317
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004318 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue())
4319 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004320 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4321
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004322 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004323 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004324 }
4325
4326 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004327 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004328 assert(DefaultValue &&
4329 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004330 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004331 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4332 if (!TableContents[I])
4333 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004334 }
4335
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004336 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004337 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004338 }
4339
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004340 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4341 // that single value.
4342 if (SingleValue) {
4343 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4344 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004345 }
4346
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004347 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4348 // table index.
4349 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4350 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4351 APInt PrevVal;
4352 APInt DistToPrev;
4353 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4354 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4355 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4356 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4357 if (!ConstVal) {
4358 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4359 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4360 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4361 break;
4362 }
4363 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
4364 if (I != 0) {
4365 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4366 if (I == 1) {
4367 DistToPrev = Dist;
4368 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4369 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4370 break;
4371 }
4372 }
4373 PrevVal = Val;
4374 }
4375 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4376 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4377 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4378 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4379 ++NumLinearMaps;
4380 return;
4381 }
4382 }
4383
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004384 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004385 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004386 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004387 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4388 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4389 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004390 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4391 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4392 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4393 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4394 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004395 }
4396 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4397 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4398 Kind = BitMapKind;
4399 ++NumBitMaps;
4400 return;
4401 }
4402
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004403 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004404 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004405 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4406
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004407 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/ true,
4408 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage,
4409 Initializer,
4410 "switch.table");
4411 Array->setUnnamedAddr(true);
4412 Kind = ArrayKind;
4413}
4414
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004415Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004416 switch (Kind) {
4417 case SingleValueKind:
4418 return SingleValue;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004419 case LinearMapKind: {
4420 // Derive the result value from the input value.
4421 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
4422 false, "switch.idx.cast");
4423 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
4424 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
4425 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
4426 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
4427 return Result;
4428 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004429 case BitMapKind: {
4430 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
4431 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
4432
4433 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
4434 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
4435 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +00004436 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004437
4438 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
4439 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(ShiftAmt,
4440 ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
4441 "switch.shiftamt");
4442
4443 // Shift down.
4444 Value *DownShifted = Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt,
4445 "switch.downshift");
4446 // Mask off.
4447 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy,
4448 "switch.masked");
4449 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004450 case ArrayKind: {
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004451 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004452 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
4453 uint64_t TableSize = Array->getInitializer()->getType()
4454 ->getArrayNumElements();
4455 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
4456 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(Index,
4457 IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(),
4458 IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
4459 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004460
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004461 Value *GEPIndices[] = { Builder.getInt32(0), Index };
David Blaikieaa41cd52015-04-03 21:33:42 +00004462 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
4463 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004464 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
4465 }
4466 }
4467 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
4468}
4469
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004470bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004471 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00004472 Type *ElementType) {
4473 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004474 if (!IT)
4475 return false;
4476 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
4477 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004478
4479 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
4480 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX/IT->getBitWidth())
4481 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004482 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004483}
4484
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004485/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
4486/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004487static bool
4488ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
4489 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
4490 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004491 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
4492 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004493
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004494 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004495 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004496 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
4497 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004498
4499 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004500 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004501
4502 // Saturate this flag to false.
4503 AllTablesFitInRegister = AllTablesFitInRegister &&
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004504 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004505
4506 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
4507 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
4508 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
4509 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004510 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004511 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004512
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004513 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
4514 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
4515 return true;
4516
4517 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
4518 if (HasIllegalType)
4519 return false;
4520
4521 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
4522 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
4523 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
4524 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004525}
4526
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004527/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
4528/// \code
4529/// if (idx < tablesize)
4530/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
4531/// else
4532/// r = default_value;
4533/// if (r != default_value)
4534/// ...
4535/// \endcode
4536/// Is optimized to:
4537/// \code
4538/// cond = idx < tablesize;
4539/// if (cond)
4540/// r = table[idx];
4541/// else
4542/// r = default_value;
4543/// if (cond)
4544/// ...
4545/// \endcode
4546/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
4547static void reuseTableCompare(User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock,
4548 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch, Constant *DefaultValue,
4549 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*> >& Values) {
4550
4551 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
4552 if (!CmpInst)
4553 return;
4554
4555 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
4556 // threading can do its work afterwards.
4557 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
4558 return;
4559
4560 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
4561 if (!CmpOp1)
4562 return;
4563
4564 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
4565 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
4566 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
4567
4568 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
4569 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
4570 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
4571 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
4572 return;
4573
4574 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
4575 // compare result.
4576 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
4577 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
4578 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
4579 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
4580 return;
4581 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
4582 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
4583 }
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00004584
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004585 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
4586 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
4587 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
4588 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
4589 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
4590 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
4591 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
4592 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
4593 return;
4594 }
4595
4596 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
4597 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
4598 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
4599 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4600 } else {
4601 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
4602 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(RangeCmp,
4603 ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
4604 RangeCheckBranch);
4605 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
4606 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4607 }
4608}
4609
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004610/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
4611/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
4612/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004613static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4614 const DataLayout &DL,
4615 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004616 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004617
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00004618 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004619 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004620 return false;
4621
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004622 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
4623 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
4624
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004625 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
4626 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
4627 // string and lookup indices into that.
4628
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00004629 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make them
4630 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
4631 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004632 return false;
4633
4634 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00004635 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004636 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
4637 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
4638 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4639 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4640
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004641 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004642 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*>, 4> ResultListTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004643 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
4644 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Constant*> DefaultResults;
4645 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*> ResultTypes;
4646 SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs;
4647
4648 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
4649 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4650 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
4651 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
4652 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
4653 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
4654
4655 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4656 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> ResultsTy;
4657 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004658 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004659 Results, DL))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004660 return false;
4661
4662 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004663 for (const auto &I : Results) {
4664 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4665 Constant *Value = I.second;
4666 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
4667 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
4668 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004669 }
4670 }
4671
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004672 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004673 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004674 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
4675 }
4676
4677 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
4678 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
4679 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
4680 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
4681
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004682 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
4683 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004684 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004685 bool HasDefaultResults = GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(),
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004686 &CommonDest, DefaultResultsList, DL);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004687
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004688 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
4689 if (NeedMask) {
4690 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
4691 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
4692 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004693 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004694 return false;
4695 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004696
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004697 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
4698 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4699 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004700 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004701 }
4702
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004703 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004704 return false;
4705
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004706 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004707 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004708 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(),
4709 "switch.lookup",
4710 CommonDest->getParent(),
4711 CommonDest);
4712
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004713 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004714 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
4715 Value *TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
4716 "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004717
4718 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
4719 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004720 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004721 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004722 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
4723 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
4724 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
4725
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004726 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
4727 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
4728 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
4729 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
4730 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4731 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004732 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
4733
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004734 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004735 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00004736 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
4737 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004738 } else {
4739 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004740 MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004741 RangeCheckBranch = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004742 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004743
4744 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
4745 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004746
4747 if (NeedMask) {
4748 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
4749 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
4750 // and we create a new LookupBB.
4751 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
4752 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
4753 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(),
4754 "switch.lookup",
4755 CommonDest->getParent(),
4756 CommonDest);
4757
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00004758 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
4759 // unnecessary illegal types.
4760 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
4761 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
4762 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004763 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004764 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
4765 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4766 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() -
4767 MinCaseVal->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
4768 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
4769 }
4770 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
4771
4772 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
4773 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
4774 // else continue with table lookup.
4775 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
4776 Value *MaskIndex = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy,
4777 "switch.maskindex");
4778 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex,
4779 "switch.shifted");
4780 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(Shifted,
4781 Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()),
4782 "switch.lobit");
4783 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
4784
4785 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
4786 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
4787 }
4788
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00004789 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
4790 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
4791 // do not delete PHINodes here.
4792 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
4793 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
4794 }
4795
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004796 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004797 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4798 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004799 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004800
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004801 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
4802 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004803 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004804
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004805 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004806
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004807 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
4808 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004809 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
4810 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004811 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
4812 ReturnedEarly = true;
4813 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004814 }
4815
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004816 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
4817 // possible.
4818 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
4819 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
4820 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
4821 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
4822 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
4823 }
4824 }
4825
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004826 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004827 }
4828
4829 if (!ReturnedEarly)
4830 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
4831
4832 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004833 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004834 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004835
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004836 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004837 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004838 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4839 }
4840 SI->eraseFromParent();
4841
4842 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004843 if (NeedMask)
4844 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004845 return true;
4846}
4847
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004848bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004849 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
4850
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004851 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
4852 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
4853 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
4854 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
4855 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004856 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00004857
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004858 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
4859 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
4860 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004861 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00004862
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004863 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
4864 // away into any preds.
4865 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
4866 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4867 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4868 ++BBI;
4869 if (SI == &*BBI)
4870 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004871 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004872 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004873
4874 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004875 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004876 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004877
4878 // Remove unreachable cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004879 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, AC, DL))
4880 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004881
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004882 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, AC, DL))
4883 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004884
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004885 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004886 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004887
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004888 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
4889 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004890
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004891 return false;
4892}
4893
4894bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
4895 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
4896 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004897
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004898 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
4899 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
4900 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
4901 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00004902 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004903 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
4904 IBI->removeDestination(i);
4905 --i; --e;
4906 Changed = true;
4907 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004908 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004909
4910 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
4911 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
4912 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
4913 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
4914 return true;
4915 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004916
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004917 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
4918 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
4919 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
4920 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
4921 return true;
4922 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004923
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004924 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
4925 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004926 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004927 }
4928 return Changed;
4929}
4930
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00004931/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
4932/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
4933/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
4934/// a shared handler.
4935///
4936/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
4937/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
4938/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
4939/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
4940/// sinking in this file)
4941///
4942/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
4943/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
4944/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
4945/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
4946/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
4947/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
4948///
4949/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
4950/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
4951/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
4952static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
4953 BasicBlock *BB) {
4954 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
4955 assert(Succ);
4956 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
4957 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
4958 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
4959 return false;
4960
4961 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
4962 if (BB == OtherPred)
4963 continue;
4964 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
4965 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
4966 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
4967 continue;
4968 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {}
4969 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
4970 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
4971 continue;
4972
4973 // We've found an identical block. Update our predeccessors to take that
4974 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
4975 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
4976 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
4977 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
4978 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
4979 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB &&
4980 II->getUnwindDest() == BB && "unexpected successor");
4981 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
4982 }
4983
4984 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
4985 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
4986 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end();
4987 I != E;) {
4988 Instruction &Inst = *I; I++;
4989 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
4990 Inst.eraseFromParent();
4991 }
4992
4993 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
4994 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
4995 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
4996 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
4997 }
4998
4999 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5000 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5001 BI->eraseFromParent();
5002 return true;
5003 }
5004 return false;
5005}
5006
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00005007bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder){
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005008 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005009
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00005010 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
5011 return true;
5012
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005013 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00005014 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005015 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
5016 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
5017 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005018
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005019 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
5020 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
5021 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5022 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5023 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5024 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005025 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005026 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI,
5027 BonusInstThreshold, AC))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005028 return true;
5029 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005030
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005031 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5032 // equivalent.
5033 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
5034 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {}
5035 if (I->isTerminator() &&
5036 TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
5037 return true;
5038 }
5039
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005040 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5041 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5042 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5043 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005044 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
5045 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005046 return false;
5047}
5048
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005049static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5050 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5051 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5052 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5053 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5054 return nullptr;
5055 PredPred = PPred;
5056 }
5057 return PredPred;
5058}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005059
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005060bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005061 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005062
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005063 // Conditional branch
5064 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5065 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5066 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5067 // switch.
5068 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005069 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005070 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005071
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005072 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5073 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5074 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
5075 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5076 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5077 ++I;
5078 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005079 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005080 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005081 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())){
5082 ++I;
5083 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5084 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5085 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005086 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005087 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005088 }
5089 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005090
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005091 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005092 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005093 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005094
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005095 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5096 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5097 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005098 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
5099 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005100
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005101 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5102 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5103 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5104 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005105 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5106 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005107 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
5108 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005109 } else {
5110 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005111 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005112 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5113 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5114 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005115 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
5116 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005117 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005118 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005119 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005120 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005121 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5122 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5123 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005124 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
5125 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005126 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005127
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005128 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5129 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5130 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5131 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005132 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005133 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005134
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005135 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005136 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5137 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005138 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005139 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005140 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005141
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005142 // Look for diamond patterns.
5143 if (MergeCondStores)
5144 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5145 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5146 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
5147 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
5148 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
5149
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005150 return false;
5151}
5152
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005153/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5154static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5155 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5156 if (!C)
5157 return false;
5158
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005159 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005160 return false;
5161
5162 if (C->isNullValue()) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005163 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005164 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005165
5166 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5167 // control flow (eg. calls)
5168 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I); &*i != Use; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005169 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005170 return false;
5171
5172 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5173 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5174 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5175 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5176
5177 // Look through bitcasts.
5178 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5179 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5180
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005181 // Load from null is undefined.
5182 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005183 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5184 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005185
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005186 // Store to null is undefined.
5187 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005188 if (!SI->isVolatile())
5189 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 && SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005190 }
5191 return false;
5192}
5193
5194/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005195/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005196static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
5197 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
5198 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
5199 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5200 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
5201 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
5202 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5203 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
5204 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
5205 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5206 // destination from conditional branches.
5207 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5208 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5209 else
5210 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1) :
5211 BI->getSuccessor(0));
5212 BI->eraseFromParent();
5213 return true;
5214 }
5215 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5216 }
5217
5218 return false;
5219}
5220
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005221bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005222 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005223
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005224 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005225 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005226
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005227 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5228 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Ramkumar Ramachandra181233b2015-01-13 04:17:47 +00005229 if ((pred_empty(BB) &&
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005230 BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005231 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00005232 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
Chris Lattner7eb270e2008-12-03 06:40:52 +00005233 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005234 return true;
5235 }
5236
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005237 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5238 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005239 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005240
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005241 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
5242 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
5243
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005244 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
5245 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
5246
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005247 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
5248 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
5249 // if there are no PHI nodes.
5250 //
5251 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
5252 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005253
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00005254 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
5255
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005256 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
5257 // eliminate it, do so now.
5258 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
5259 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005260 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005261
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005262 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005263 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005264 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00005265 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005266 } else {
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005267 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005268 }
5269 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00005270 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder)) return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00005271 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5272 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder)) return true;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00005273 } else if (CleanupReturnInst *RI =
5274 dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5275 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005276 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005277 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005278 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
5279 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5280 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005281 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
5282 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5283 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI)) return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00005284 }
5285
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005286 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005287}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005288
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005289/// This function is used to do simplification of a CFG.
5290/// For example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop,
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005291/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
5292/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
5293///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005294bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005295 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC) {
5296 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(),
5297 BonusInstThreshold, AC).run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005298}